Chevrolet 2004 Malibu Specifications

2009 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 1-2
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-32
Airbag System
......................................... 1-58
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-73
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-21
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-40
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-43
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-50
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-51
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-28
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-56
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-26
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-14
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-50
Tires
...................................................... 5-51
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-90
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-97
Electrical System ...................................... 5-98
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-108
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-17
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the MALIBU
Emblem, and the name MALIBU are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of
what is in the manual and the page number where it can
be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15898474 B Second Printing
ii
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart
.:
Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+:
Fuses
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
I:
Charging System
Cruise Control
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
O:
Exterior Lamps
#:
Fog Lamps
iv
i:
j:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::
Oil Pressure
}:
Power
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints ...............................................1-2
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8
Power Lift Seat ..............................................1-9
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................1-35
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-39
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-54
Airbag System ...............................................1-58
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-63
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-64
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-64
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-71
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-72
Restraint System Check ..................................1-73
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-74
1-1
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is
at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
1-2
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
CAUTION:
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
(Continued)
1-3
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
1-4
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or
increase lumbar support.
Heated Seats
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light will be lit next to the number 1.
On vehicles with heated
front seats, the buttons are
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s and front
passenger seats.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.
The seat will heat to the high setting. The indicator light
above the switch will be lit next to the number 2.
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
To recline the seatback:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-6
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
1-7
Seatback Latches
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle is a coupe or retractable hardtop model,
it has a seatback latch as part of the manual recline
lever. This feature provides easy access to the
rear seats. To operate the seatback latch, pull up on the
manual recline lever. The seatback will automatically
spring forward. To operate the latch from the rear seat,
pull back on the top of the manual recline lever.
1-8
Power Lift Seat
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
1-9
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding
a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that the
safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in
all three positions.
1-10
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-11
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Put someone on it.
1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-35. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-17
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-66 for more information.
1-26
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-32.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instruction on use and important safety
information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt
is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and probably other new
parts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-74.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-29
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-31
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 1-26 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length
of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system
or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-33
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-34
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed for
them. Every time infants and young children
ride in vehicles, they should have the protection
provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-35
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during
a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.
An infant should be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
1-36
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-37
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-39
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-40
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-41
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
CAUTION:
1-42
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH
or occupant using
safety belt
1-43
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-44
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-45
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
1-46
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has
a label, near the crease
between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers,
behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for
additional information.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1-48
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on
page 1-42. Depending on where you place the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH
anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you can
install two of them. If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position, and
install the other one either in the driver-side position or in
the center position. Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-49
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-50
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose the anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint,
raise it. See Head Restraints on page 1-2.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a single
tether, route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
1-52
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-42.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-53
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-54
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-42.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-66 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-32 for more information, including
important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66
for additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-44 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for
top tether anchor locations.
(Continued)
1-55
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-56
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the
vehicle is started.
1-57
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-66 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
•
•
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
1-58
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
1-59
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-32 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-35.
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag
symbol.
1-60
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-61
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-62
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle goes straight into the object.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which
help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-58.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate
if the crash severity is above the system’s designed
threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
1-63
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-63 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
1-64
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail
airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag
module may be hot for several minutes. For location of
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-64.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
1-65
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are
visible during the system check. If you are using remote
start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you
may not see the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-32.
1-66
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
1-67
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
1-68
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
for more information, including important safety
information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-54.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in
a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a
rear seat position in the vehicle and see your
dealer/retailer.
1-69
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-70
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-72 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-71
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
1-72
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-66.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-31 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-64. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-93.
1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle
has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31.
1-74
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Door Ajar Reminder ......................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Trunk ..........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................2-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-23
Starting the Engine .......................................2-24
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission) .........................2-26
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission) ...........................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-33
Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-34
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-37
Compass .....................................................2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-40
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-40
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-43
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................2-44
Storage Areas ................................................2-50
Glove Box ...................................................2-50
Cupholders ..................................................2-50
2-2
Instrument Panel Storage ...............................2-50
Front Storage Area .......................................2-50
Center Console Storage .................................2-50
Driver Storage Compartment ..........................2-51
Convenience Net ..........................................2-51
Sunroof .........................................................2-51
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to operate the remote start feature.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional
information.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn
chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking.
See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for more
information.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the
turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.
2-5
The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and
back-up lamps may come on each time K is pressed.
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-50 for additional information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-18.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):
Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again
to cancel the panic alarm.
2-6
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
(Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-7
/ (Remote Start):
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
information.
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get two separate 10 minute
starts.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
2-8
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions on
page 2-22 for information regarding the ignition positions
on your vehicle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for additional
information.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
Remote Start Ready
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
•
•
•
•
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
2-9
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
lock counterclockwise to lock the door and clockwise to
unlock it or use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, move the manual lock control on
the door or use the power door lock switch.
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should
be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
2-10
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
" (Unlock):
Q (Lock):
Press to unlock the doors.
Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message
will display if one of the doors is not fully closed.
This happens when the ignition is on and the shift
lever is moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors
automatically when the following are met:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• The vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors
and arming of the theft-deterrent system for five seconds
when the power door lock switch or remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
This feature cannot be disabled.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door
is closed, all of the doors will lock. To cancel the delay
and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power
door lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent
system will arm after 30 seconds.
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50.
All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
(P) Park.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
Lockout Protection
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
the doors while the key is in the ignition, a chime
will sound three times. All doors will then lock.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
Trunk
Press the trunk release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter for one second to open the
trunk from the outside.
{ CAUTION:
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from
the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
CAUTION:
2-12
(Continued)
Remote Trunk Release
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Press the button located
on the driver door near
the map pocket to open
the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in
P (Park) or when the ignition is off.
2-13
Trunk Assist Handle
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
There is an assist handle
located on the inside of
the trunk.
Use the assist handle to lower the trunk lid. The TRUNK
AJAR message will appear if the trunk is not properly
closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to
help you close the trunk lid.
2-14
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only intended
to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-15
Power Windows
Express-Up Window
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power window
will need to be re-programmed for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s
battery before reprogramming.
To program the driver window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
on the driver’s door. In addition, there is a switch on
each passenger door.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
Express-Down Window
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
The driver window has an express-down feature. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way down
and release, to automatically lower.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull
and hold the front of the switch.
2-16
The window is now reprogrammed.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
Window Lockout
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window returns
to normal operation once the obstruction or condition
is removed.
The driver power window controls also include a lockout
button.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
o (Window Lockout):
Press the lockout button to stop
the rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver and front passenger can still operate all the
windows with the lock on. When the red part of the switch
is visible, you have returned to normal window operation.
Sun Visors
{ CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side, to block out glare from the side.
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver’s side visor.
When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch
is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
flashes once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
If you do not want to arm the content theft system,
lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors
or with the inside power door lock switches.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
Disarming the System
Arming the System
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors
are closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, the system
will arm.
2-18
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the
content theft security system alarm was previously
triggered.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-20
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 5-99. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,
the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who
can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-29 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-21
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
9 (LOCK/OFF):
This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be
applied.
2-22
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is not running.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position
while the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to the ON/RUN position for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened,
the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and
the key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Heated Seats (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver door is
opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
2-23
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
2-24
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
On the 2.4L engine, the engine coolant heater cord
is located near the air cleaner box on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. On the 3.5L and
3.6L V6 engines, the engine coolant heater cord is
located on the driver side around the battery box.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16
for more information on location.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission)
The automatic
transmission has
a shift lever located
on the console between
the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-26
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) when the
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push
the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 2-34.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-19.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle that way, you could
damage the transmission. Have the vehicle serviced
right away. You can drive in L2 (Low) when you are
driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and D (Drive) for
higher speeds until then.
2-27
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts.
You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive)
when driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing a
trailer, so that there is less shifting between gears.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission)
The automatic transmission
has a shift lever located
on the console between
the seats.
L (Low): This position gives you access to 4 (Fourth),
3 (Third), 2 (Second) and 1 (First) gear ranges.
This provides more engine braking but lower fuel
economy than D (Drive). You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the electronic range
select is put in L (Low), the transmission will not shift
into lower gears until the vehicle is going slow enough.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-28
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button
before you can shift from P (Park) while the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting
Out of Park on page 2-34.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-19.
2-29
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-30
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
M (Manual Mode): This position, allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. If the vehicle
has this feature, see Driver Shift Control (DSC).
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
While driving in manual mode, the transmission will
remain in the driver selected gear. When coming
to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle
will automatically shift into 1 (First) gear.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions
per minute (RPM):
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear if the vehicle speed or engine
RPM is too low.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is
too high.
Second or Third Gear Start Feature
2. Press the + (plus) paddle located on top of
the steering wheel controls forward to upshift,
or push the backside of the shift paddle rearward
to downshift.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument
cluster will change from the currently displayed message
to the letter “M”, For Manual position, and a number
indicating the requested gear range when moving
the shift lever forward or rearward.
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and
icy conditions, you may want to shift the gear select tap
switch into Second or Third gear. A higher gear allows
you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.
With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set to pull
away in Second or Third gear.
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the
M (Manual Mode).
2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of the
button to select Second or Third gear. The vehicle
will start from a stop position in Second or Third gear.
3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.
While using the DSC feature the transmission will have
firmer shifting and sportier performance. You can use
this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in gear
longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking.
2-31
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on
page 3-34.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel
2-32
the pedal release. If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light
comes on and a chime sounds as a warning that the
parking brake is still on.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also display
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) as a reminder
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-46.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-29.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in P (Park).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
2-33
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to apply the brake pedal then
press the shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park). See Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission) on page 2-26 or Automatic
Transmission Operation (Six Speed Transmission) on
page 2-28.
2-34
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
gear you wish.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
{ CAUTION:
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION:
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
(Continued)
2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-29.
2-36
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System
on page 2-40 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass display and OnStar®
controls. See your dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 2-40 for more information
about the services OnStar® provides.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
2-37
Compass
Compass Operation
Press
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
O to turn the compass display on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass displays the current compass direction
after a few seconds.
Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C
appears in the compass window, the compass may need
to be reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle very
slowly, in circles, until the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight. It is necessary to adjust
the compass to compensate for compass variance if
the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as a long distance, cross-country
trip, it is necessary to adjust the compass variance.
2-38
O until a zone number displays.
Once the zone number displays, press O
2. Press and hold
3.
repeatedly until the correct zone number is reached.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
Outside Power Mirrors
You may have one of the following power mirror
controls:
If you have these controls,
they are located on the
driver door.
If you have these controls,
they are located near the
driver side mirror.
Use the selector switch located below the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected
mirror in the desired direction.
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located above the control pad, to select the driver
or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror so
you can see the side of your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind your vehicle.
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings
on the automatic dimming inside rearview mirror.
2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-24 for more information.
OnStar® System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
2-40
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to
a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-41
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a
few simple voice commands to browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information. This feature is only available in
the continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-42
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the
OnStar equipment is active.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-43
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
2-44
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After pressing this button, complete the following
steps in less than 30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be used
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
2-45
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
2-46
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-47
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2,
in order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-48
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 55 seconds.
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half
of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
2-49
Storage Areas
Front Storage Area
Glove Box
A storage area is located in front of the shift lever.
Push the bottom of the door and the storage will
automatically open.
Pull the handle up to open.
Cupholders
Removable cupholders are located in front of the center
console. See “Center Console Storage Area” following
for how to access them. Press and hold the tab at
the rear of the cupholders and lift up and rearward to
remove the cupholders. This will disengage the two
forward tabs.
To reinstall them, place the two forward tabs into the
slots and push the rear of the cupholder down.
For vehicles with rear seat cupholders, pull down the
door on the back of the center console to access them.
Instrument Panel Storage
An instrument panel storage area, with a removable
liner, is located above the radio. Slide the latch toward
the back of the vehicle to open the storage area.
2-50
Center Console Storage
The center console storage area has a storage tray
and a main storage. Pull up on the driver side latch to
access the storage tray. Pull up on the passenger side
latch to access the main storage. There is a removable
divider and may be a storage pocket located at the rear
of the center console.
The armrest on top of the center console can be
adjusted to a rearward, middle, and forward position.
Pull or push the front of the armrest to adjust to
the desired position.
Another storage area is located in front of the main
storage. Push down and then forward on the rear of the
cover to access. There is a storage tray and removable
cupholders.
Driver Storage Compartment
A driver storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of
the instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.
Pull out to remove for cleaning.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should not
be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the switch is located on
the headliner between the
map lamps.
The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-23.
Press and release the back of the switch to open the
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press
and release the back of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented
position.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly. Always close
the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
2-51
✍ NOTES
2-52
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ...................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Headlamps ..................................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Headlamps Off in Park ..................................3-14
Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-16
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-16
Parade Dimming ...........................................3-16
Reading Lamps ............................................3-16
Electric Power Management ...........................3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Climate Control System .................................3-20
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-24
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-27
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-28
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-29
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-30
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-30
Tachometer .................................................3-30
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-30
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-32
Charging System Light ..................................3-33
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-34
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-35
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light ........................................................3-35
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-36
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-37
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-38
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-41
Security Light ...............................................3-41
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-42
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-42
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-50
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-56
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-57
Radio(s) ......................................................3-59
Using an MP3 ..............................................3-71
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-77
Bluetooth® ...................................................3-78
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-89
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-89
Radio Reception ...........................................3-91
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-92
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-92
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-92
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Driver Shift Control (If Equipped). Automatic
Transmission Operation (Four Speed Transmission)
on page 2-26 or Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission) on page 2-28.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-29.
E. Windshield Wipers on page 3-8 and Windshield
Washer on page 3-9.
F. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-50.
G. Audio System(s) on page 3-56.
H. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16.
Fog Lamps on page 3-15.
I. Driver Storage Compartment on page 2-51.
J. Hood Release on page 5-14.
K. Cruise Control on page 3-10. Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
L. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 3-6.
M. Horn on page 3-6.
N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89
(If Equipped).
O. Ignition Positions on page 2-22.
P. Climate Control System on page 3-20 or Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-24.
Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
R. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission) on page 2-26 or
Automatic Transmission Operation (Six Speed
Transmission) on page 2-28.
S. Front Storage Area on page 2-50. Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-18.
T. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
U. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
V. Glove Box on page 2-50.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
| again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or
backward or forward into a comfortable position. Pull the
lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
53:
O:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change
is complete.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses on page 5-99.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release
the lever to turn them off.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
9 (Off):
Turns off the windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):
For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount
of delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle. As
vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
3-8
x (Delay):
While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger
bars mean the movement is more frequent.
6 (Low Speed):
1 (High Speed):
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the
wipers are turned off.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
For steady wiping at low speed.
For wiping at a high speed.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers
start; then release. The wipers stop after one wiping
cycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install
new blades.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit
breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the motor gets
stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow or ice, and
then turn the wipers back on.
3-9
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more be maintained without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
3-10
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off.
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control
System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically
disengages. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-8 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 4-6. When road conditions allow, the cruise control
can be used again.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also
goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To
return to the previously set speed, you do not need to
repeat the set process again. Once at a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired
speed is reached and then release the button.
• To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the previously set cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. When the
brakes are applied this ends the cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal to disengage
the cruise control.
• Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise
control.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition are turned off.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,
and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps
at night.
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn on
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this
position only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park)
position.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the
steering column operates the exterior lamps.
3-13
Headlamps on Reminder
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turned
off while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will
sound.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel that controls the DRL. Do not cover this
sensor or the head lamps will be on when they are not
needed.
Headlamps Off in Park
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
3-14
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
only position (This applies only to vehicles that are
first sold in Canada).
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are
not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the
parking lamp position.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when they are needed.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.
Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp
system will turn on when it is not needed.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than this delay.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to
the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button for this feature is
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on or off. An indicator
light comes on when the fog lamps are on.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps
are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob with this symbol
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering column.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
3-16
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide light as you exit.
Parade Dimming
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.
It prevents the display lights and indicator lights from
being dim, while the parking lamps are used during
the day.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
closed. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature
designed to protect the vehicle’s battery.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity)
is left on while the ignition is turned off, the battery
run-down protection system will automatically shut the
lamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining
the battery.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below the
climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Turn on the ignition.
Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.
Open a door.
Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
button (if equipped).
• Press the remote trunk release button.
• Press the power door lock switch.
The battery run-down feature will also be activated
when any door on the vehicle is left open and the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
3-18
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The
accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
The vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used
to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum
limit of 150 watts.
The power outlet is located
on the rear of the center
console.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in
use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN
and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged
into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into
the outlet.
3-19
If you try to connect equipment using more than
150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection
circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off
and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-23. The power restarts when equipment that
operates within the limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
3-20
A. Fan Control
B. Recirculation
C. Temperature
Control
D. Outside Air
E. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window
Defogger
Operation
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one, to provide
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant the engine uses that provides
heat to warm the inside of the vehicle. For more
information, see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-25.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan must
be on to run the air-conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air will be directed toward
the side windows.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor
outlets, with some air directed to the side windows. When
this mode is selected, the system automatically turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The air-conditioning compressor operates although the
indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning indicator light
turns off when defog is selected. If the air-conditioning
button is pressed while in defog mode, the indicator light
will turn on. If the button is pressed again, the light will
turn off. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshield
of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield with some
air directed to the floor vents. In this mode, outside air is
pulled into the vehicle. The air-conditioning compressor
will not run unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing. The air-conditioning compressor operates
although the indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning
indicator light turns off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,
the indicator light turns on. If the button is pressed again,
the light turns off. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.
3-21
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select
0.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
it is on.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned off
is normal.
Maximum Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
air conditioning system operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the
C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
# air conditioning.
Select the ? recirculation mode.
3. Select
4.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
3-22
Using these settings together for long periods of time can
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
Air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout
the vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all
modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation
mode. Press : to cancel the recirculation mode.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is
on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The
recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you try to
use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot function.
Pressing this button cancels the outside air mode. When
switching to the defog or defrost modes the system
automatically moves from recirculation to outside air.
When the vehicle or fan is turned off and back on, the
system defaults to outside air automatically. Only use
recirculation mode when it is needed for comfort, since
window fogging can occur.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
< REAR: Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the
rear window defogger is on. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs for
about seven minutes before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
For vehicles with the remote start feature, when it is
activated the climate control system heats or cools the
inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set before
the vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
will not operate during remote start. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors heat when the rear window defogger
is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-39.
3-23
Automatic Climate Control System
Automatic Operation
For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling,
and ventilation can be automatically controlled.
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan speed
control and the air delivery mode control knobs to activate
the automatic system. When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature and
air delivery.
To place the system in automatic mode do the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3-24
Fan Control
Air Conditioning
Recirculation
Outside Air
Rear Window
Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode
Control
G. Display
H. Temperature
Control
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the
AUTO position.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down the vehicle.
2. Set the temperature.
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Press w or x to adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C)
the system remains at the maximum cooling setting.
If the temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle to
heat or cool any faster.
Do not to cover the sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on the intensity
of the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until
warm air is available. The length of delay depends on
the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan knob
overrides this delay and changes the fan to the
selected speed.
Manual Operation
9 (Off):
Select this position on the fan knob to turn off
the entire climate control system. Outside air still enters
the vehicle. The airflow direction and temperature can be
adjusted.
x / w Temperature Control: Press the arrows to
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the side window outlets.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog or
frost more quickly. The system automatically controls
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO mode.
If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, the
air conditioning compressor automatically runs to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. The air
conditioning indicator light blinks three times if the
compressor is turned off while in this mode.
9 (Fan Control):
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed.
# (Air Conditioning): Press turn the air conditioning
on and off. An indicator light turns on to show the
air conditioning is on.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
in the vehicle.
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
3-25
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed for
the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
To warm or cool the air delivered, press the temperature
buttons to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the air
inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the system
maximizes its performance by using recirculation as
necessary.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation
of the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air
to the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,
press x or w to the desired temperature setting.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and
press x or w to adjust the temperature.
: (Outside Air):
Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show it is on. Air from
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the vehicle.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it
cannot be used with the recirculation mode. Pressing
this button cancels the recirculation mode.
3-26
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light above the button comes on to
show it is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you
try to use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot
function.
Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation function.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with the floor,
defrost, or defog modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns
off to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to prevent
window fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning is
on. Allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help
dehumidify the air.
Rear Window Defogger
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
For vehicles with remote start, when it is activated the
climate control system heats and cools the inside of the
vehicle using the previous system settings before the
vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
will not operate during remote start.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the
rear window defogger is on.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the
button again.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
For vehicles with heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors will also heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on
page 2-39.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
With the automatic climate control system, the
climate control displays “RS” in place of the temperature
to indicate that remote start is activated. For best
performance, turn both the fan and mode knobs to AUTO.
If the temperature is cold enough and the mode knob is
set to AUTO, the system begins in defrost to clear the
windows. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
moving it either up and down or side-to-side, to change
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle.
3-27
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of
the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation. However,
extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather
can cause window fogging.
3-28
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
how much fuel the vehicle has used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Base version shown, Canada Similar
3-29
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Safety Belt Reminders
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must be
set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is not
possible, then it must be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44 for more information.
3-30
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-66 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-58.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-31
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66 for important
safety information. The instrument panel has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
3-32
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
for more information, including important safety
information.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
3-33
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
carefully stop. The brake pedal may be harder to push
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or
two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a brake problem.
3-34
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-34.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for all
brake related DIC messages.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the
Traction Control System
(TCS), the indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
are disabled.
3-35
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system is
not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for more
information.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-34. The vehicle’s
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-34
for more information.
3-36
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
pointer moves towards the H (United States) or to the
shaded thermostat symbol area (Canada), the engine is
too hot.
A temperature indicator light turns on and a chime
sounds.
The vehicle is operated under normal driving conditions
and the temperature indicator light comes on, pull off the
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information. Stop and
check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is
underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on
page 5-51 for more information.
3-37
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
3-38
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop
the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine.
If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and
see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-10. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-39
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
3-40
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not
flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be
low on oil and it might have some other system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-18.
3-41
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
3-42
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. When the indicator nears empty, a
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays.
The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the vehicle should
be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the
side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
the fuel gage:
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the fuel tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s
capacity to fill it.
• The indicator moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.
3-43
DIC Operation and Displays
Trip Odometer
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
Information Modes
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature along with A or B displays. These modes
show the current distance traveled since the last
reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
Outside Air Temperature
FUEL RANGE
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer. The
temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
The outside air temperature appears on the left side of
the DIC display and the odometer, or trip odometer,
appears on the right side of the display.
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the tank.
Odometer
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50.
3-44
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-21 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24.
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy,
this screen cannot be reset.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in
the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again until
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
3-45
DIC Warnings and Messages
BRAKE FLUID
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-34 for more information.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other
warning messages.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
This message displays if the automatic headlamp system
is disabled with the headlamp switch. See Automatic
Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more information.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be
reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 5-24, Engine Oil on page 5-21, and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See
Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more
information.
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
3-46
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
Tires on page 5-51, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20,
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44. If the tire pressure is low, the low
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 3-37.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
CRUISE ENGAGED
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or
hear the system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC
stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
This is normal when the system is operating. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35
for more information.
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
3-47
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
information.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds
after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 3-42, Fuel on page 5-5, and Filling the Tank on
page 5-10 for more information.
3-48
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38.
POWER STEERING
On some vehicles, this message displays if a problem
has been detected with the electric power steering. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more
information.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and a chime sounds when the
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
information. Have the system serviced by your dealer/
retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this
message displays and a chime sounds if there has been
a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays
on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on.
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See
Tire Pressure Light on page 3-37. Several conditions may
cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 5-62 for more information. If the
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem
with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
3-49
TRACTION OFF
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the system
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
information.
Entering Personalization Menu
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from
their default state since that time.
3-50
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
Personalization Menu Modes
REMOTE START
OIL LIFE RESET
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When
REMOTE START appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-24. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-51
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will
still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-52
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/
turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock, or
trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter a second time.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 2-10, Delayed Locking
on page 2-11, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-53
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11
for more information.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-54
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on when
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-55
Audio System(s)
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
3-56
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-23 for more information.
Setting the Clock
With Date Display
Without Date Display
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD
Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press H and then the pushbutton located below
the forward arrow tab. Once the time 12H and 24H are
displayed, press the pushbutton located below the
desired option to select the default. Press H again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
The date does not automatically display. To see the date
press H while the radio is on. The date with display times
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.
3-57
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press MENU.
3. Press the softkey below the
MM, DD, YYYY displays.
H tab. The HR, MIN,
4. Press the softkey below any one of the tabs you
want to change.
5. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
3-58
6. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
The date does not automatically display. To see the date
press MENU and then softkey below the H tab while
the radio is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and time
display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press MENU, and then the softkey below the
H tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
2. Press the softkey below the forward arrow tab.
The time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default,
or let the screen time out.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (Base)
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio
with CD (MP3) similar, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
3-59
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
3-60
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base). Press
to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio with
CD (MP3), or Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3).
f (Tune):
Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
to the previous station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to
stop scanning.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
to the next station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again to
stop scanning.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
4 (Information):
For vehicles with the Radio with CD
(Base), press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
press 4 to display the time.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song.
Song title information will be displayed on the top line of
the display while the artist information will be displayed
on the bottom line, it the information is available during
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. When information is not
available, “No Info” displays.
3-61
Storing Radio Stations
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
as a favorite.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are
also stored with the favorite stations.
3-62
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio
display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information
is longer than what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every three seconds when
Auto Text is activated.
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
To store preset stations:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
three seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
3-63
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID,
and TREB.
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
• Press ©SEEK, or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
Press f until the tone control labels display, then turn f
to change the setting.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the
softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more
than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port, Radio with CD (MP3), or Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3):
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (Base):
1. Press
f until the tone control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
3-64
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f .
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .
To adjust balance or fade using
1. Press
f:
f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
To adjust balance or fade using
`:
` until the speaker control labels display.
Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
1. Press
2.
control label displays.
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL
or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
To select and find a desired category:
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3-65
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category, do one of the following:
• Turn f .
• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn
f to display the category to be removed.
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-66
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service fee
is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-77 for more
information.
Loading a CD
Ejecting a CD
Radio’s with a Single CD Player
Radio’s with a Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release
^.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold ^ for two seconds. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player
Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
To eject the CD that is currently playing:
1. Press and release Z . The radio beeps once and
Ejecting Disc displays
2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,
remove the CD from the player.
To eject all CDs:
1. Press and hold Z for two seconds. A beep
sounds and Ejecting All Discs displays.
2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,
remove the CD from the player.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs.
3. Press
^ again to cancel loading more CDs.
3-67
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if
more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
3-68
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs
in a Six-Disc CD player.
To use random on the base radio with Single CD player:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
To use random on a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:
1. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,
press the softkey below the RDM tab until
Randomize All Discs displays.
2. To play tracks from the CD currently playing in
random order, press the softkey below the RDM
tab until Random Current Disc displays.
3. To turn off random, press the same softkey again.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Care of CDs
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for
more information.
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom
of a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
3-69
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another audio source.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio
device is connected to the auxiliary input. The portable
audio device continues playing until it is stopped or
turned off.
3-70
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
Press again and the system begins playing audio from
the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device may
display.
Using the USB Port
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for information about
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
• Portable USB Hard Drives
• Fifth generation or later iPod
• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPod classic
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
apple.com/support.
Using an MP3
Format
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3
and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device
as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
Compressed Audio
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.
Radios with a single CD player read all MP3 files first,
then the uncompressed CD audio files.
Radios with a six-CD player only read MP3 files unless
the CAT button is pressed to toggle to uncompressed
audio files.
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 50 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 50 playlists.
Up to 255 files.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 700 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 65,535 files.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
FAT16
FAT32
3-71
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
3-72
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not show parts of words on
the last page of text and the extension of the filename is
not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there
is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below
go to the first track in the next folder.
c T to
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD
or all discs in the Six-Disc CD player. To use random:
1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current
CD in random order. Press the same softkey
again to turn off random play.
2. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until
Randomize All Discs displays to play songs from
all CDs loaded in the Six-Disc CD player in random
order. Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to have the files played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the
disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning
in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
3-73
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
To change from playback by artist to playback by album:
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from
the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD
and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and
connect the other end to the USB port located on the front
of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection
works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo may appear on
the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s display. The
iPod music appears on the radio’s display and begins
playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
3-74
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
f (Tune):
Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display
to display the functions listed below, or press the
softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
it to use that function.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.
s REV (Reverse):
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to
the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory
on a USB storage device.
Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below
2. Turn
c.
f to scroll through the list of folders.
4 (Information):
Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
3-75
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s
menu system. Files are sorted by:
• Playlists
• Artists
• Albums
3-76
• Genres
• Songs
• Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
f to scroll through the list of menus.
Press f to select the desired menu.
Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
2. Turn
3.
4.
selected menu.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
' to select between
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All
is being used. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track):
Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off):
Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB
storage device or iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
3-77
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after
having the vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
3-78
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-89 for more information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is
used if the volume is turned down too low.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook):
Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected
to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
3-79
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3-80
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command for
a list of all paired phones. The system responds with
“Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes or No”
followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3-81
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3-82
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
3-83
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
3-84
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a
tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
3-85
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when another
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
3-86
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
Three-Way Calling
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
c x to end a call.
b g to link all
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
3-87
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the number
properly, it responds “Dial Number, Please say
yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the number is
correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with
“OK, Sending Number” and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3-88
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
To change radio stations:
• Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
• Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
3-89
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release
track.
w or x to go to the next or previous
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list, then press and hold w to play the
highlighted track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
3-90
w or x to scroll up or down
• To select a folder, press and hold w when the
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
2. Press and hold
folder list.
3. Press and release
the list.
x to go back to the previous
folder is highlighted.
• To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold
c (End):
x.
Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-40
and Bluetooth® on page 3-78 for more information.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-91
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
3-92
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. If the radio can be used to change the volume
level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered
pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level changes
between Normal and Loud. The selected volume
level appears on the radio display.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4
Braking .........................................................4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-20
Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-20
Towing ..........................................................4-26
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-26
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-26
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-29
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same
TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall
near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
for Everyone on page 1-12.
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
4-3
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
4-4
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace
with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to
stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 3-35.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Braking in Emergencies
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic
brake control module increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal
pressure is quickly decreased.
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-43.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
4-6
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
system may be re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
4-7
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces
engine power by closing the throttle and managing
engine spark to limit wheel spin.
This light will flash when
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,
but this is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
4-8
When this light is on
solid and either the
SERVICE TRACTION or
TRACTION OFF message
is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
center console.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed,
the differential could be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
4-9
Steering
Steering Tips
Electric Power Steering
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If the vehicle has the electric power steering system and
the engine stalls while driving, the power steering assist
system will continue to operate until you are able to stop
the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because the
electric power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Hydraulic Power Steering
If the vehicle has the hydraulic power steering system
and power steering assist is lost because the engine
stops or the power steering system is not functioning,
the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
4-10
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless
the vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to
lock the wheels. See Braking on page 4-4.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface
is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice,
or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types of driving
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles
and deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
4-14
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-51.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road
ahead and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{ CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-16
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery
roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
4-17
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
4-18
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
•
•
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-20.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-74.
4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
or stability system. Shift back and forth between
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out
after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-26.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
4-20
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of
the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-51 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The Tire and Loading
Information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-21
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-22
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-29 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs
(136 kg)
B
700 lbs
(317 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs
(340 kg)
lbs
Available Cargo Weight = 250
(113 kg)
4-23
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed the
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-24
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the driver side center pillar.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue
weight if pulling a trailer.
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
4-25
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-26
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Does the vehicle have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-15.
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the
destination has been reached.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 5-99 for more information.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
4-27
Dolly Towing
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
4-28
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from
the rear.
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for the safety of the driver and
the passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
4-29
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
4-30
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for
more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20 for more
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-31
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Here are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are,
then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch
is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-35 in the Index for more information.
4-32
Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection
at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Backing Up
Making Turns
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-33
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission
is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-34.
4-34
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-34.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-35
✍ NOTES
4-36
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................5-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-13
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-14
Hood Release ..............................................5-14
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-16
Engine Oil ...................................................5-21
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-24
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-26
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-28
Engine Coolant .............................................5-29
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-33
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-33
Engine Overheating .......................................5-34
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Brakes ........................................................5-39
Battery ........................................................5-42
Jump Starting ...............................................5-43
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-48
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-49
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-50
Tires ..............................................................5-51
Winter Tires .................................................5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-59
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-60
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-61
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-66
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-70
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-72
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-72
Tire Chains ..................................................5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-89
Appearance Care ............................................5-90
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-90
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-91
Leather .......................................................5-92
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-92
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93
5-2
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94
Finish Care ..................................................5-94
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-95
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-95
Tires ...........................................................5-96
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96
Finish Damage .............................................5-96
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98
Electrical System ............................................5-98
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fuses .........................................................5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-102
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .....................5-105
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-108
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-72.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-16.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies
the vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of
the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 5-8. In all other engines, use only
the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane
on page 5-6.
5-5
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B),
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), or the 3.5L V6 engine
(VIN Code N), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise
when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7
for additional information.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
California Fuel
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
5-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on
page 5-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine
(VIN Code K) can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85).
We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are
designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such
as corn and other crops.
5-8
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of Energy
has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/
afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find
E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if
the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel
is not properly formulated for your climate. If this
happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline
to the fuel tank can improve starting.
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (0°C),
the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more
than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate repeatedly
between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels,
it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-10.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused
by additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
5-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
5-10
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,
the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline
can be used. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-8.
5-11
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.
5-12
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit
properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-38.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION:
•
•
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
(Continued)
5-13
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-14
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the steering
column.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
5-15
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see:
5-16
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.
B. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-28.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-29.
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.
H. See Battery on page 5-42.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
J. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 5-102.
5-17
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:
5-18
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-28.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-29.
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap/Dipstick (Out of
View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-28.
J. See Battery on page 5-42.
K. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 5-102.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
5-19
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you see:
5-20
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).
See Cooling System on page 5-28.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-29.
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-28.
J. See Battery on page 5-42.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment
Fuse Block on page 5-102.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
5-21
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-16
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
L4 Engine
V6 Engine
If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine or
below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick
for the V6 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-108.
5-22
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
5-23
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-24
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. Change the oil
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
2. Press and hold both the INFO and reset buttons
for at least one second to access the
personalization menu and display the OIL LIFE
RESET message.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
3. Press and hold the reset button for at least
one second. An ACKNOWLEDGED message
will appear when the system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-25
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-26
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
5-27
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines, the transmission
fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the
transmission is at operating temperature. If you need
to check the transmission fluid level, please take your
vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4,
3.6L V6 Engines similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
5-28
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-34.
5-29
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing
else needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
outside temperature.
engine temperature.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
5-30
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29
for more information.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD
mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
5-32
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark. If the
level is below the FULL COLD mark, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the mark. Repeat this
procedure until the level remains constant at the
FULL COLD mark for at least five minutes.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for
more information on location.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more
information on location.
5-33
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage as
well as an engine coolant temperature warning light
on your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-37 and Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-36.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-36 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
5-34
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” following.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
5-35
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km)
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-21.
5-36
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-16 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with V6
engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine have electric
power steering and do not use power steering fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
at the MAX mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is
at the MIN mark when the engine is cold or hot, power
steering fluid should be added.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
The fluid level should be within the crosshatch area on
the dipstick.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or MIN mark on
the dipstick, add just enough fluid to bring the level
within the crosshatch area.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
What to Use
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the ADD and HOT marks when the
engine is cold, and at the HOT mark when the engine
is hot. If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine
is cold or hot, power steering fluid should be added.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid
level should be between the MIN (Minimum) and
MAX (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-16 for reservoir
location.
5-38
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-16 for the location
of the reservoir.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new
brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-39
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-40
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-108.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
5-41
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-16 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-42
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-43 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
5-43
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-44
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-46
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals to their original positions.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
3. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp
5. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
2. Remove the convenience net hooks holding the
trunk trim.
8. Install a new bulb.
5-48
7. Pull the bulb from the socket.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
Back-up Lamp
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
2. Remove the push nuts holding the trunk trim.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the lamp assembly.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the
two screws counterclockwise.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.
5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it
through the fascia opening.
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
5-49
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp and Taillamp
921
License Plate Lamp
168
Turn Signal Lamp
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
To remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
5-50
2. Push the release button.
3. Slide the blade forward.
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
forward to remove.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-60 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
5-51
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17
size tires, they are classified as low-profile
performance tires. These tires are designed for
very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.
You may also notice more road noise with
low-profile performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance
on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance
as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires,
there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 5-68.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare
tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-53
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-89 and If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-75.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-54
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-56
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-20.
5-57
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.
5-58
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-20.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-20. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-89.
5-59
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-60
High-Speed Operation
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for
the front and rear tires, when operating your vehicle at
high-speed conditions. When you end high-speed driving
return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62 for
additional information.
5-61
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn
the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists.
TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected,
the TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-62
At the same time a message to check the pressure in
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-66 and Tires on page 5-51.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-63
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
5-64
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s
air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap,
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning process is done.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or
if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-67 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel
Replacement on page 5-72.
5-66
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-108.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-76.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
5-67
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-68
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers
over a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-53 for additional
information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a
full set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-66 for information on
proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for use
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-89.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give
a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-61.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-69
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-70
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,
the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
5-72
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
5-73
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P215/60R16, P225/50R17, or
P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains.
There is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
CAUTION:
5-74
(Continued)
(Continued)
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the front
tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
CAUTION:
5-76
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-89 for more information.
4. Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place.
5. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.
5-77
Tire Changing Tools
1. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to loosen wheel
wrench.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A)
and jack (B).
5-78
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has
plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps.
You might need to use the wheel wrench to loosen
them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps that
have plastic wheel nut caps.
3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressing
the button and pulling on the end of the wrench.
You must do this before using the wheel wrench.
3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the
wheel to locate the wheel nuts.
If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without
plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge of the
plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel to
locate the wheel nuts.
5-79
4. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
5. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest
the flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is
touching the jacking flange under the body. Do not
place the jack under a body panel.
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
5-80
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit.
5-81
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
9. Remove the flat tire.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-82
11. Install the compact spare tire.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or
with the wrench until the wheel is held against
the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-83
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-108 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-108 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-84
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown,
with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut
caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire
compartment:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve)
from the jack and remove the center cap from the
wheel.
3. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to
extend it.
4. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
side of the jack.
5-85
5. Raise the jack to the
height shown and
lock the wrench onto
the jack.
7. With the valve stem up, place the tire on the
compartment floor with the rear of the tire under the
trim panel. The tire may not lay completely flat.
8. Line up the bolt with the wheel center.
9. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheel
from being scratched, screw the bolt extension
onto the bolt through the wheel center hole.
10. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.
11. Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut.
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor, making
sure it contacts the bolt. Thread the jack retainer
nut until it contacts the jack.
5-86
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Cover
Wing Nut
Extension
Flat Tire (valve stem up)
Nut
Jack
Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89.
5-87
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to
extend it.
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
side of the jack.
5-88
4. Raise the jack to the
height shown and
lock the wrench onto
the jack.
Compact Spare Tire
{ CAUTION:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
5. Place the jack in the spare tire well. Make sure the
stow bolt goes through the hole in the center of the
wrench on the jack, with the base of the jack towards
the front of the vehicle. Turn the jack retainer nut until
it firmly contacts the wrench. Do not over tighten.
6. Place the compact spare into the tire compartment
with the stow bolt going through the center hole of
the wheel.
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut until it firmly
contacts the wheel. Do not over tighten.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience.
5-89
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Appearance Care
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Interior Cleaning
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-90
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
5-91
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-92
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the appearance and
feel of the interior and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Washing Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
5-93
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-93.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
5-94
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may
cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if
they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-95
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
5-96
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from
outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates
of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-108 for the vehicle’s engine code.
5-97
Service Parts Identification Label
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label
has the following information:
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Paint information
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from working
as they should.
5-98
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
instrument panel near the floor on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
5-99
5-100
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
POWER
MIRRORS
Power Mirrors
IGN SENSOR
Ignition Switch
EPS
Electronic Power Steering
STRG WHL
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Illumination
RUN/CRANK
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
RADIO
Audio System
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
Interior Lamps
HVAC
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
CLUSTER/
THEFT
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Theft Deterrent System
ONSTAR
OnStar®
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
POWER
WINDOWS
Power Windows
AIRBAG (IGN)
Airbag (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
HVAC CTRL
(BATT)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
HVAC CTRL
(IGN)
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
PEDAL
Not Used
DOOR LOCK
Door Locks
WIPER SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
ROOF/HEAT
SEAT
Sunroof, Heated Seat
5-101
Fuses
Usage
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
AIRBAG
(BATT)
Airbag (Battery)
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
FUSE PULLER
Fuse Puller
5-102
Fuses
1
2
3
Usage
Air Conditioner Clutch
Electronic Throttle Control
Engine Control Module IGN 1
(LZ4 & LZE)
Fuses
4
5
6
7
Usage
Transmission Control Module
Ignition 1
Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)
Emission
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
5-103
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
5-104
Usage
Horn
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Front Fog Lamps
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
Engine Control Module BATT
(LY7 & LE5)
Windshield Wiper
Antilock Brake System (IGN 1)
Engine Control Module IGN 1
(LY7 & LE5)
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning Blower
Body Control Module 1
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Rear Electrical Center 2
Antilock Brake System
Fuses
25
26
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
54
55
56
Usage
Body Control Module 2
Starter
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control Module
Battery
Ignition Module (LZ4, LZE & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition Coils Odd (LY7)
Injectors (LZ4, LZE & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition Coils Even (LY7)
Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters
(LY7, LZ4 & LZE)
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Driver Power Window
Engine Control Module BATT
(LZ4 & LZE)
AIR Solenoid
Regulated Voltage Control
DC/AC Inverter
Antilock Brake System BATT
Relays
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
48
49
53
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
Air Conditioning Clutch
High Beam
Front Fog Lamps
Horn
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
Windshield Wiper 2
Daytime Running Lamps
Stoplamps
AIR Solenoid
Diodes
27
Wiper
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
Usage
5-105
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5-106
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Not Used
Fuses
5
6
7
8
Usage
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
Not Used
Not Used
Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Usage
Not Used
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, XM™ Satellite
Radio, UGDO
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
Trunk Release
Rear Defog
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
Relays
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 (Diode)
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Cargo Lamp
5-107
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Automatic Transmission*
Automatic Transmission 4-Speed (Bottom Pan Removal)
7.0 qt
6.6 L
Automatic Transmission 6-Speed (Drain and Refill)
5.3 qt
5.0 L
2.4L L4 Engine
7.5 qt
7.1 L
3.5L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engine
9.7 qt
9.2 L
2.4L L4 Engine
5.0 qt
4.7 L
3.5L V6 Engine
4.0 qt
3.8 L
3.6L V6 Engine
5.5 qt
5.2 L
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
5-108
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
16.3 gal
61.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
*Transmission fluid capacity is approximate. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-28 for information on
checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
B
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6
K
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6
N
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.6L V6
7
Automatic
0.044 in (1.10 mm)
5-109
✍ NOTES
5-110
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-2
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-6.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine parts.
To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in
the Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required
for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-24 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that the first service be Maintenance I, the
second service be Maintenance II, and then alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However,
in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more
often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-21. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-66 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
3.6L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as
needed.
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service only). Change filter
(except 6-speed). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires (V6 only). An Emission Control
Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
hydraulic power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-50 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-95 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-73.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(except 6-speed) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-21.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
6-8
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-29.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-66.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-21.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-29.
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake DOT
(GM
Part
No. U.S. 88862806,
System
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
6-12
Usage
Hydraulic
Power Steering
System
(if equipped)
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Part Numbers
ACDelco Part Numbers
22676970
A1627C
2.4L L4 Engine
12605566
PF457G
3.5L V6 Engine
89017342
PF61
3.6L V6 Engine
89017524
PF48
2.4L L4 Engine
12625058
41-103
3.5L V6 Engine
12591131
41-100
3.6L V6 Engine
12597464
41-990
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm)
25800624
—
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm)
25800623
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 Engine
2.4L I4 Engine
6-14
3.6L V6 Engine
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................7-19
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-7
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver
if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons,
the driver must present identification before this
service is given.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with the
most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
7-9
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
7-11
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician
using the proper equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
7-12
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility
that meets your needs before you ever need collision
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-13
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-14
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-16
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for
current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order
form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
See also OnStar® System on page 2-40 in this manual
for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-19
✍ NOTES
7-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-23
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-72
Additional Required Services, Scheduled
Maintenance ................................................. 6-6
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98
Adjustment
Chime Level ............................................... 3-92
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-26
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-31
Airbag System ................................................ 1-58
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-72
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-64
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-71
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-64
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-63
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-32
Antenna
Backglass ................................................... 3-92
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-92
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Warning Light ............................................. 3-35
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-90
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7
Audio System ................................................. 3-56
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-89
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-57
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-92
1
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Systems
Radio Reception ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ........................................... 2-26,
3-59
3-91
3-89
3-24
3-15
5-28
2-28
Break-In, New Vehicle .....................................
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
Headlamps .................................................
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................
2-21
5-50
3-15
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-49
5-48
5-68
B
C
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-92
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-17
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-14
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-78
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-6
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39
Antilock ....................................................... 4-5
Parking ...................................................... 2-32
System Warning Light .................................. 3-34
Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6
Calibration ..................................................... 2-38
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-108
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-35
Trunk ......................................................... 2-12
Winter Driving ............................................. 4-17
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-71
Center Console Storage ................................... 2-50
2
Chains, Tire ...................................................
Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Lamp ..............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children ..................................................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ..........................
Systems .....................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................
Interior .......................................................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
5-74
3-33
3-38
5-14
5-97
1-35
1-44
1-32
1-52
1-54
1-39
1-42
3-92
5-95
5-94
5-91
5-94
5-92
5-90
5-92
5-96
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Climate Control System ................................... 3-20
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-27
Climate Control Systems
Automatic ................................................... 3-24
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-57
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-89
Compass ....................................................... 2-38
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-18
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-51
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 5-29
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-37
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-36
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-33
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7-10
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-42
Cupholders .................................................... 2-50
3
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6
Offices ......................................................... 7-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-12
Data Recorders
Event ......................................................... 7-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-14
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-71
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-16
Door
Ajar Reminder ............................................. 2-11
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
4
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-50
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Driver Storage Compartment ............................ 2-51
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-13
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-12
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-11
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-20
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2
E
E85 Fuel ......................................................... 5-8
EDR ............................................................. 7-17
Electrical Equipment
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102
Fuses ........................................................ 5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-99
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................... 5-105
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-20
Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-6
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-35
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-26
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-38
Compartment Overview ................................ 5-16
Coolant ...................................................... 5-29
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-37
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-36
Cooling System ........................................... 5-28
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-35
Oil ............................................................. 5-21
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-24
Engine (cont.)
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry/Exit Lighting ...........................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
5-36
5-34
2-24
3-16
7-18
1-32
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-26
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-28
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-50
5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-8
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-13
Filling the Tank ........................................... 5-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................ 5-10
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Fuses ........................................................... 5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-99
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................... 5-105
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98
G
Gage
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Trip Odometer .............................................
6
3-30
3-30
3-37
3-42
3-30
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-43
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-6
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-50
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-47
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-2
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-47
Headlamps .................................................... 3-13
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-14
Delayed ..................................................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Headlamps Off in Park .................................... 3-14
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-25
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-42
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-60
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-14
Release ..................................................... 5-14
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-59
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-29
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Storage Area .............................................. 2-50
Introduction ...................................................... 6-2
J
K
Keyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-5
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-53
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-38
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-14
Dome ........................................................ 3-16
License Plate .............................................. 5-49
Reading ..................................................... 3-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-26
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-44
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
Lift Seat, Power ............................................... 1-9
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-16
Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-16
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-43
7
Lights ............................................................ 3-13
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-31
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-35
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-34
Charging System ......................................... 3-33
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-42
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-36
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-42
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-41
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-32
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-30
Security ..................................................... 3-41
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-37
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-20
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-44
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
8
M
Maintenance
Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-38
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-40
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39
MP3 ............................................................. 3-71
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19
Net
Convenience ............................................... 2-51
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-30
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-30
Off-Road
Recovery .................................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-21
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-24
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-40
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-44
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-27
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-18
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-39
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-40
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-36
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-96
Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-16
Park
Headlamps Off in Park ................................. 3-14
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Parking Brake ................................................ 2-32
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-32
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-66
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 2-20
Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
California ..................................................... 5-4
Phone
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-78
9
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Lift Seat ....................................................... 1-9
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-19
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-23
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-16
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-31
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-33
Privacy .......................................................... 7-17
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ......................................................
Radio(s) ........................................................
Radios
Reception ...................................................
Setting the Clock .........................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
10
7-19
3-59
3-91
3-57
3-89
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-16
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-37
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-26
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-77
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-50
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ................................................ 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ................................................ 7-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-74
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-23
Ride Control Systems ....................................... 4-6
Electronic Stability (ESC) ................................ 4-6
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-20
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 2-51
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-36
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-30
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-93
Extender .................................................... 1-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-26
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-31
Safety Defects
Reporting to the Canadian Government .......... 7-16
Reporting to General Motors ......................... 7-16
Reporting to the United States Government ..... 7-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Power Lift Seat ............................................. 1-9
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-54
Security Light ................................................. 3-41
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-38
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10
Service Parts Identification Label ....................... 5-98
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-71
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-57
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96
11
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 2-34
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-33
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-89
Installing .................................................... 5-79
Removing ................................................... 5-77
Storing ....................................................... 5-85
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-108
Speedometer .................................................. 3-30
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-24
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-89
Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic ..................... 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 2-50
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-51
Cupholders ................................................. 2-50
Driver Storage Compartment ......................... 2-51
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-50
Glove Box .................................................. 2-50
Instrument Panel ......................................... 2-50
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-19
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-51
12
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-30
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-48
Telescopic Wheel .............................................. 3-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 3-89
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 2-20
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-57
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-37
Tires ............................................................. 5-51
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-95
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68
Chains ....................................................... 5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Cleaning .................................................... 5-96
Compact Spare ........................................... 5-89
Different Size .............................................. 5-70
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-60
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-59
Tires (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-66
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-62
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-61
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-77
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-53
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-72
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67
Winter ........................................................ 5-52
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-26
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-29
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-26
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8
Traction Control System ................................... 3-35
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-28
Transmission Operation, Automatic ............ 2-26, 2-28
Transportation, Courtesy .................................. 7-10
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-30
Trunk ............................................................ 2-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-70
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-43
Operation ................................................... 2-44
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-4
Loading ...................................................... 4-20
Running While Parked .................................. 2-36
Symbols ......................................................... iii
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Vehicle Data Recording, Radio
Frequency (RFID) ........................................ 7-19
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-98
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-50
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-27
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-28
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-72
Different Size .............................................. 5-70
Replacement ............................................... 5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-67
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-42
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-38
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-50
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-95
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-98
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
Winter Tires ................................................... 5-52
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-77
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-92
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14